1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
PE-Stamped Plans Included|Design Online in 3D|Financing from $89/mo

Steel Buildings Shop By Use Case

Whatever you need a steel building for — workshop, retail showroom, fleet garage, horse barn, RV storage, distribution warehouse, indoor arena or worship hall — Steel and Stud engineers the right structure for your use. Browse our use-case catalog of pre-engineered buildings from $14,500. Every order includes PE-stamped drawings tailored to your local wind and snow loads, plus free nationwide delivery. Widths from 30 to 100+ feet, lengths to 200+ feet, column-free interiors when your use case calls for it.

$14,500
STARTING PRICE
13+
BUILDING TYPES
200ft
MAX CLEAR SPAN
48
STATES COVERED
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Browse Use Cases

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 841–880 of 1025 resultsSorted by price: low to high

30×30 Pre-Engineered Commercial Metal Building for Municipal Institutional Storage with Clear Height up to 20 Ft

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

30′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×30 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage | Steel and Stud — From $17,650
12
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,100$17,650SAVE $2,450
or $368/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×30Municipal Institutional Storage

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Municipal Institutional Storage·Size30×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,650$20,100Save $2,450
or as low as $368/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×30
30×30
this size
$17,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 900 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X30-MUNICIPAL-INSTITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal utility building.

30 feet wide × 30 feet long. Code-compliant public-entry spec. The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

Public service areaSecure records / storageSTAFF + BREAK AREA30′ × 30′ · 900 sq ft · municipal utility building

Public service area · Secure records / storage · Staff + break area

Public service area at the front, secure records / storage in the middle, staff + break area at the rear. Capacity: single-department outpost.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: ADA entry, security vestibule.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal Institutional Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal Institutional Storage spec sheet.

Width30'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal Institutional Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal institutional storage
Everyday municipal institutional storage
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal institutional storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
municipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage — what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$368/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×30 municipal institutional storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $368/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×30?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 30′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal Institutional Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal Institutional Storage also viewed:

🏡 30×30

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

30×30 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →
🏡 30×30

Workshop / Hobby Shop

30×30 workshop / hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →
🏡 30×30

Metal Carport

30×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 30×30

Commercial Steel Building

30×30 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 30×30

RV / Boat Storage

30×30 rv / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage →
🎯 30×30

Home Gym / Studio

30×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 30×30

Metal Barn

30×30 metal barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn →
🎯 30×30

Man Cave / She Shed

30×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 30×30

Storage / Light Industrial Shop

30×30 storage / light industrial shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage / Light Industrial Shop →
🌾 30×30

Equipment Barn

30×30 equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Barn →
🏛️ 30×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

30×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal Institutional Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage cost?

A 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud starts at $17,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $368/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×30 municipal institutional storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×30 municipal institutional storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×30 municipal institutional storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $368/month on a 30×30 municipal institutional storage.

What warranty comes with the 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×30 municipal institutional storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×30 municipal institutional storage typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal Institutional Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×30 Pre-Engineered Commercial Metal Building for Municipal Institutional Storage with Clear Height up to 20 Ft

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

30′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×30 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage | Steel and Stud — From $17,650
12
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,100$17,650SAVE $2,450
or $368/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×30Municipal Institutional Storage

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Municipal Institutional Storage·Size30×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,650$20,100Save $2,450
or as low as $368/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×30
30×30
this size
$17,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 900 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X30-MUNICIPAL-INSTITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal utility building.

30 feet wide × 30 feet long. Code-compliant public-entry spec. The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

Public service areaSecure records / storageSTAFF + BREAK AREA30′ × 30′ · 900 sq ft · municipal utility building

Public service area · Secure records / storage · Staff + break area

Public service area at the front, secure records / storage in the middle, staff + break area at the rear. Capacity: single-department outpost.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: ADA entry, security vestibule.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal Institutional Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal Institutional Storage spec sheet.

Width30'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal Institutional Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal institutional storage
Everyday municipal institutional storage
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal institutional storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
municipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage — what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$368/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×30 municipal institutional storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $368/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×30?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 30′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal Institutional Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal Institutional Storage also viewed:

🏡 30×30

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

30×30 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →
🏡 30×30

Workshop / Hobby Shop

30×30 workshop / hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →
🏡 30×30

Metal Carport

30×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 30×30

Commercial Steel Building

30×30 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 30×30

RV / Boat Storage

30×30 rv / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage →
🎯 30×30

Home Gym / Studio

30×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 30×30

Metal Barn

30×30 metal barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn →
🎯 30×30

Man Cave / She Shed

30×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 30×30

Storage / Light Industrial Shop

30×30 storage / light industrial shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage / Light Industrial Shop →
🌾 30×30

Equipment Barn

30×30 equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Barn →
🏛️ 30×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

30×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal Institutional Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage cost?

A 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud starts at $17,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $368/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×30 municipal institutional storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×30 municipal institutional storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×30 municipal institutional storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $368/month on a 30×30 municipal institutional storage.

What warranty comes with the 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×30 municipal institutional storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×30 municipal institutional storage typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal Institutional Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18x35 metal building: primary product hero render (630 sq ft, proportion-matched from 30×60 source) from Steel and Stud

18×35 Prefab Metal Building Kit for Equipment Lean-To Shed with Customizable Leg Height up to 20 Ft

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed | Steel and Stud — From $9,300
12
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×35Equipment Lean To Shed

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Lean To Shed·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 630 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-EQUIPMENT-LEAN-TBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: tool cage, material racking, lockable walk-in door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Lean To Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Lean To Shed spec sheet.

Width18'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Lean To Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment lean to shed
Everyday equipment lean to shed
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment lean to shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
equipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed — what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 equipment lean to shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Lean To Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Lean To Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →
🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →
🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →
🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Storage Shop →
🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →
🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Room →
🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Lean To Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed cost?

A 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 equipment lean to shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 equipment lean to shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 equipment lean to shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 equipment lean to shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 equipment lean to shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 equipment lean to shed typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Lean To Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x35 metal building: primary product hero render (630 sq ft, proportion-matched from 30×60 source) from Steel and Stud

18×35 Prefab Metal Building Kit for Equipment Lean-To Shed with Customizable Leg Height up to 20 Ft

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed | Steel and Stud — From $9,300
12
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×35Equipment Lean To Shed

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Lean To Shed·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 630 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-EQUIPMENT-LEAN-TBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: tool cage, material racking, lockable walk-in door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Lean To Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Lean To Shed spec sheet.

Width18'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Lean To Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment lean to shed
Everyday equipment lean to shed
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment lean to shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
equipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed — what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 equipment lean to shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Lean To Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Lean To Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →
🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →
🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →
🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Storage Shop →
🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →
🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Room →
🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Lean To Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed cost?

A 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 equipment lean to shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 equipment lean to shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 equipment lean to shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 equipment lean to shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 equipment lean to shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 equipment lean to shed typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Lean To Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

10×20 Prefab Steel Storage Building for Motorcycle ATV Storage with Eave Height up to 20 Ft

200 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×20 steel building delivers 200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage | Steel and Stud — From $2,950
12
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,350$2,950SAVE $400
or $61/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings10×20Motorcycle ATV Storage

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Motorcycle ATV Storage·Size10×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,950$3,350Save $400
or as low as $61/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×20
10×20
this size
$2,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 200 sq ft enclosed
  • 200 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your gear + toy locker.

10 feet wide × 20 feet long. Ramp-friendly threshold, lockable man door. The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

Bike / sled slotsWall gear racksBench corner10′ × 20′ · 200 sq ft · gear + toy locker

Bike / sled slots · Wall gear racks · Bench corner

Bike / sled slots at the front, wall gear racks in the middle, bench corner at the rear. Capacity: 6 bikes/sleds + gear.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wall hooks, floor anchors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle ATV Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle ATV Storage spec sheet.

Width10'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle ATV Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle atv storage
Everyday motorcycle atv storage
200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle atv storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage — what makes it different.

200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$61/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×20 motorcycle atv storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $61/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×20?

200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 20′ footprint with 200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,600–$2,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle ATV Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 10×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle ATV Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

10×20 single-vehicle carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →
🏡 10×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

10×20 enclosed metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →
🏡 10×20

Metal Storage Shed

10×20 metal storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Storage Shed →
🏡 10×20

Backyard Workshop

10×20 backyard workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop →
🌾 10×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

10×20 equipment & hay shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →
🏡 10×20

Pool House / Cabana

10×20 pool house / cabana configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House / Cabana →
🏡 10×20

Home Office / Studio

10×20 home office / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office / Studio →
🌾 10×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

10×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →
🏢 10×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

10×20 mobile office / job site configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →
🎯 10×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

10×20 hobby room / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →
🏡 10×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

10×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle ATV Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage cost?

A 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $61/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Almost always for 200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $61/month on a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×20 motorcycle atv storage typically adds $1,600–$2,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle ATV Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$2,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

10×20 Prefab Steel Storage Building for Motorcycle ATV Storage with Eave Height up to 20 Ft

200 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×20 steel building delivers 200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage | Steel and Stud — From $2,950
12
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,350$2,950SAVE $400
or $61/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings10×20Motorcycle ATV Storage

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Motorcycle ATV Storage·Size10×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,950$3,350Save $400
or as low as $61/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×20
10×20
this size
$2,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 200 sq ft enclosed
  • 200 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your gear + toy locker.

10 feet wide × 20 feet long. Ramp-friendly threshold, lockable man door. The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

Bike / sled slotsWall gear racksBench corner10′ × 20′ · 200 sq ft · gear + toy locker

Bike / sled slots · Wall gear racks · Bench corner

Bike / sled slots at the front, wall gear racks in the middle, bench corner at the rear. Capacity: 6 bikes/sleds + gear.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wall hooks, floor anchors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle ATV Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle ATV Storage spec sheet.

Width10'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle ATV Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle atv storage
Everyday motorcycle atv storage
200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle atv storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage — what makes it different.

200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$61/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×20 motorcycle atv storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $61/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×20?

200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 20′ footprint with 200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,600–$2,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle ATV Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 10×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle ATV Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

10×20 single-vehicle carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →
🏡 10×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

10×20 enclosed metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →
🏡 10×20

Metal Storage Shed

10×20 metal storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Storage Shed →
🏡 10×20

Backyard Workshop

10×20 backyard workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop →
🌾 10×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

10×20 equipment & hay shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →
🏡 10×20

Pool House / Cabana

10×20 pool house / cabana configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House / Cabana →
🏡 10×20

Home Office / Studio

10×20 home office / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office / Studio →
🌾 10×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

10×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →
🏢 10×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

10×20 mobile office / job site configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →
🎯 10×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

10×20 hobby room / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →
🏡 10×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

10×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle ATV Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage cost?

A 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $61/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Almost always for 200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $61/month on a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×20 motorcycle atv storage typically adds $1,600–$2,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle ATV Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Custom Clear-Span Metal Building Kit for Indoor Sports Facility with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $212,800
12
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$242,600$212,800SAVE $29,800
or $4433/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$212,800$242,600Save $29,800
or as low as $4433/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$212,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4433/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4433/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 indoor sports facility cost?

A 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $212,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4433/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4433/month on a 75×100 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 indoor sports facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 indoor sports facility typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$212,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Custom Clear-Span Metal Building Kit for Indoor Sports Facility with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $212,800
12
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$242,600$212,800SAVE $29,800
or $4433/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$212,800$242,600Save $29,800
or as low as $4433/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$212,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4433/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4433/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 indoor sports facility cost?

A 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $212,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4433/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4433/month on a 75×100 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 indoor sports facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 indoor sports facility typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$212,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×30 Residential Metal Building for Man Cave and She Shed with Adjustable Leg Heights up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Man Cave She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Man Cave She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Man Cave She Shed

25×30 Man Cave She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Man Cave She Shed·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Stud-framed and drywall-ready interior when you finish it out. The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Main loungeKitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 30 guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: media wall, covered porch, French doors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Man Cave She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave she shed
Everyday man cave she shed
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave she shed + seasonal storage
man cave she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Man Cave She Shed — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 man cave she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Man Cave She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Man Cave She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×30

Home Gym / Studio

25×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 man cave she shed cost?

A 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 man cave she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 man cave she shed?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 man cave she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 man cave she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 man cave she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 man cave she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 man cave she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 man cave she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 man cave she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 man cave she shed typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×30 Residential Metal Building for Man Cave and She Shed with Adjustable Leg Heights up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Man Cave She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Man Cave She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Man Cave She Shed

25×30 Man Cave She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Man Cave She Shed·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Stud-framed and drywall-ready interior when you finish it out. The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Main loungeKitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 30 guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: media wall, covered porch, French doors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Man Cave She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave she shed
Everyday man cave she shed
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave she shed + seasonal storage
man cave she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Man Cave She Shed — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 man cave she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Man Cave She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Man Cave She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×30

Home Gym / Studio

25×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 man cave she shed cost?

A 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 man cave she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 man cave she shed?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 man cave she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 man cave she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 man cave she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 man cave she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 man cave she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 man cave she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 man cave she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 man cave she shed typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×30 Custom Steel Building Kit for Home Gym Studio with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Home Gym Studio | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Home Gym Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Home Gym Studio

25×30 Home Gym Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Studio·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~16 at once.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Home Gym Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Studio spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym studio
Everyday home gym studio
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym studio + seasonal storage
home gym studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Home Gym Studio — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 home gym studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Home Gym Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Home Gym Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🎯 25×30

Man Cave / She Shed

25×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 home gym studio cost?

A 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 home gym studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 home gym studio?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 home gym studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 home gym studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 home gym studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 home gym studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 home gym studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 home gym studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 home gym studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 home gym studio typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×30 Custom Steel Building Kit for Home Gym Studio with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Home Gym Studio | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Home Gym Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Home Gym Studio

25×30 Home Gym Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Studio·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~16 at once.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Home Gym Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Studio spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym studio
Everyday home gym studio
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym studio + seasonal storage
home gym studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Home Gym Studio — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 home gym studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Home Gym Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Home Gym Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🎯 25×30

Man Cave / She Shed

25×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 home gym studio cost?

A 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 home gym studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 home gym studio?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 home gym studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 home gym studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 home gym studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 home gym studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 home gym studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 home gym studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 home gym studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 home gym studio typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Workshop Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $15,800
12
25×40 Workshop Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,000$15,800SAVE $2,200
or $329/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Workshop Hobby Space

25×40 Workshop Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 workshop hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Hobby Space·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,800$18,000Save $2,200
or as low as $329/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$15,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 25×40 workshop hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Workshop Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop hobby space
Everyday workshop hobby space
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Workshop Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$329/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 workshop hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $329/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Workshop Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Workshop Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 workshop hobby space cost?

A 25×40 workshop hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $15,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $329/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 workshop hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 workshop hobby space?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 workshop hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 workshop hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 workshop hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $329/month on a 25×40 workshop hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 workshop hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 workshop hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 workshop hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 workshop hobby space typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Workshop Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $15,800
12
25×40 Workshop Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,000$15,800SAVE $2,200
or $329/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Workshop Hobby Space

25×40 Workshop Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 workshop hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Hobby Space·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,800$18,000Save $2,200
or as low as $329/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$15,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 25×40 workshop hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Workshop Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop hobby space
Everyday workshop hobby space
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Workshop Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$329/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 workshop hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $329/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Workshop Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Workshop Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 workshop hobby space cost?

A 25×40 workshop hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $15,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $329/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 workshop hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 workshop hobby space?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 workshop hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 workshop hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 workshop hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $329/month on a 25×40 workshop hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 workshop hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 workshop hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 workshop hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 workshop hobby space typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Commercial Steel Building

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $20,850
12
25×40 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,750$20,850SAVE $2,900
or $434/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Commercial Steel Building

25×40 Commercial Steel Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,850$23,750Save $2,900
or as low as $434/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$20,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. The 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 8 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA-width entry door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Commercial Steel Building — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$434/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $434/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 commercial steel building cost?

A 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $20,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $434/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 commercial steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $434/month on a 25×40 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 commercial steel building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 commercial steel building typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Commercial Steel Building

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $20,850
12
25×40 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,750$20,850SAVE $2,900
or $434/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Commercial Steel Building

25×40 Commercial Steel Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,850$23,750Save $2,900
or as low as $434/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$20,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. The 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 8 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA-width entry door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Commercial Steel Building — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$434/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $434/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 commercial steel building cost?

A 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $20,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $434/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 commercial steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $434/month on a 25×40 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 commercial steel building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 commercial steel building typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Man Cave She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $20,850
12
25×40 Man Cave She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,750$20,850SAVE $2,900
or $434/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Man Cave She Shed

25×40 Man Cave She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Man Cave She Shed·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,850$23,750Save $2,900
or as low as $434/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$20,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Stud-framed and drywall-ready interior when you finish it out. The 25×40 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Main loungeKitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: media wall, covered porch, French doors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Man Cave She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave she shed
Everyday man cave she shed
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave she shed + seasonal storage
man cave she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Man Cave She Shed — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$434/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 man cave she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $434/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Man Cave She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Man Cave She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 man cave she shed cost?

A 25×40 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $20,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $434/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 man cave she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 man cave she shed?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 man cave she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 man cave she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 man cave she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $434/month on a 25×40 man cave she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 man cave she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 man cave she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 man cave she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 man cave she shed typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Man Cave She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $20,850
12
25×40 Man Cave She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,750$20,850SAVE $2,900
or $434/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Man Cave She Shed

25×40 Man Cave She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Man Cave She Shed·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,850$23,750Save $2,900
or as low as $434/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$20,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Stud-framed and drywall-ready interior when you finish it out. The 25×40 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Main loungeKitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: media wall, covered porch, French doors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Man Cave She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave she shed
Everyday man cave she shed
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave she shed + seasonal storage
man cave she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Man Cave She Shed — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$434/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 man cave she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $434/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Man Cave She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Man Cave She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 man cave she shed cost?

A 25×40 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $20,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $434/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 man cave she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 man cave she shed?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 man cave she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 man cave she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 man cave she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $434/month on a 25×40 man cave she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 man cave she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 man cave she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 man cave she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 man cave she shed typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $14,550
12
25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,600$14,550SAVE $2,050
or $303/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Equestrian Arena Tack Room

25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 equestrian arena tack room from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equestrian Arena Tack Room·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,550$16,600Save $2,050
or as low as $303/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$14,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your arena support building.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Dutch door + gable vents for airflow. The 25×40 equestrian arena tack room from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Tack + saddle wallFEED + SUPPLIESGrooming / cross-tie bay25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · arena support building

Tack + saddle wall · Feed + supplies · Grooming / cross-tie bay

Tack + saddle wall at the front, feed + supplies in the middle, grooming / cross-tie bay at the rear. Capacity: supports an outdoor arena.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: saddle racks, feed bins.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena Tack Room spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena tack room
Everyday equestrian arena tack room
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena tack room + seasonal storage
equestrian arena tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$303/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 equestrian arena tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $303/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room cost?

A 25×40 equestrian arena tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $14,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $303/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 equestrian arena tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equestrian arena tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $303/month on a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 equestrian arena tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 equestrian arena tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 equestrian arena tack room typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $14,550
12
25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,600$14,550SAVE $2,050
or $303/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Equestrian Arena Tack Room

25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×40 equestrian arena tack room from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equestrian Arena Tack Room·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,550$16,600Save $2,050
or as low as $303/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$14,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your arena support building.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Dutch door + gable vents for airflow. The 25×40 equestrian arena tack room from Steel and Stud puts 1,000 sq ft to work.

Tack + saddle wallFEED + SUPPLIESGrooming / cross-tie bay25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · arena support building

Tack + saddle wall · Feed + supplies · Grooming / cross-tie bay

Tack + saddle wall at the front, feed + supplies in the middle, grooming / cross-tie bay at the rear. Capacity: supports an outdoor arena.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: saddle racks, feed bins.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena Tack Room spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena tack room
Everyday equestrian arena tack room
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena tack room + seasonal storage
equestrian arena tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$303/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 equestrian arena tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $303/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Equestrian Arena Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room cost?

A 25×40 equestrian arena tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $14,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $303/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 equestrian arena tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equestrian arena tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $303/month on a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 equestrian arena tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 equestrian arena tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 equestrian arena tack room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 equestrian arena tack room typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Three Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Three Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Three Car Detached Garage

20×70 Three Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 three car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Three Car Detached Garage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-THREE-CAR-DETACHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×70 three car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Three Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three car detached garage
Everyday three car detached garage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree car detached garage + seasonal storage
three car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Three Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 three car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Three Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Three Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 three car detached garage cost?

A 20×70 three car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 three car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 three car detached garage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 three car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 three car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 three car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 three car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 three car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 three car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 three car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 three car detached garage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Three Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Three Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Three Car Detached Garage

20×70 Three Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 three car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Three Car Detached Garage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-THREE-CAR-DETACHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×70 three car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Three Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three car detached garage
Everyday three car detached garage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree car detached garage + seasonal storage
three car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Three Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 three car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Three Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Three Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 three car detached garage cost?

A 20×70 three car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 three car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 three car detached garage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 three car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 three car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 three car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 three car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 three car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 three car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 three car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 three car detached garage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 RV Cover with Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 RV Cover Storage | Steel and Stud — From $15,350
12
20×70 RV Cover Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,500$15,350SAVE $2,150
or $320/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70RV Cover Storage

20×70 RV Cover Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 rv cover storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Cover Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,350$17,500Save $2,150
or as low as $320/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$15,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. The 20×70 rv cover storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

RV BAYDaily driverGear / storage20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Gear / storage

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, gear / storage at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 14-ft roll-up door, gable ends, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 RV Cover Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover storage
Everyday rv cover storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover storage + seasonal storage
rv cover storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 RV Cover Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$320/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 rv cover storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $320/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 RV Cover Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 RV Cover Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 rv cover storage cost?

A 20×70 rv cover storage from Steel and Stud starts at $15,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $320/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 rv cover storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 rv cover storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 rv cover storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 rv cover storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 rv cover storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $320/month on a 20×70 rv cover storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 rv cover storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 rv cover storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 rv cover storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 rv cover storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 RV Cover with Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 RV Cover Storage | Steel and Stud — From $15,350
12
20×70 RV Cover Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,500$15,350SAVE $2,150
or $320/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70RV Cover Storage

20×70 RV Cover Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 rv cover storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Cover Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,350$17,500Save $2,150
or as low as $320/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$15,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. The 20×70 rv cover storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

RV BAYDaily driverGear / storage20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Gear / storage

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, gear / storage at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 14-ft roll-up door, gable ends, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 RV Cover Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover storage
Everyday rv cover storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover storage + seasonal storage
rv cover storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 RV Cover Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$320/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 rv cover storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $320/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 RV Cover Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 RV Cover Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 rv cover storage cost?

A 20×70 rv cover storage from Steel and Stud starts at $15,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $320/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 rv cover storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 rv cover storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 rv cover storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 rv cover storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 rv cover storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $320/month on a 20×70 rv cover storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 rv cover storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 rv cover storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 rv cover storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 rv cover storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Contractor Workshop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Contractor Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $24,000
12
20×70 Contractor Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,350$24,000SAVE $3,350
or $500/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Contractor Workshop

20×70 Contractor Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Contractor Workshop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,000$27,350Save $3,350
or as low as $500/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$24,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-CONTRACTOR-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Contractor Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor workshop
Everyday contractor workshop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor workshop + seasonal storage
contractor workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Contractor Workshop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$500/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 contractor workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $500/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Contractor Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Contractor Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 contractor workshop cost?

A 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $500/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 contractor workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 contractor workshop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 contractor workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 contractor workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 contractor workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $500/month on a 20×70 contractor workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 contractor workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 contractor workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 contractor workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 contractor workshop typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$24,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Contractor Workshop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Contractor Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $24,000
12
20×70 Contractor Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,350$24,000SAVE $3,350
or $500/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Contractor Workshop

20×70 Contractor Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Contractor Workshop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,000$27,350Save $3,350
or as low as $500/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$24,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-CONTRACTOR-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Contractor Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor workshop
Everyday contractor workshop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor workshop + seasonal storage
contractor workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Contractor Workshop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$500/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 contractor workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $500/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Contractor Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Contractor Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 contractor workshop cost?

A 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $500/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 contractor workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 contractor workshop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 contractor workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 contractor workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 contractor workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $500/month on a 20×70 contractor workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 contractor workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 contractor workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 contractor workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 contractor workshop typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms | Steel and Stud — From $22,100
12
20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,200$22,100SAVE $3,100
or $460/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Equipment Shed Hobby Farms

20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed Hobby Farms·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,100$25,200Save $3,100
or as low as $460/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$22,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-EQUIPMENT-SHED-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed Hobby Farms.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed Hobby Farms spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed Hobby Farms.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed hobby farms
Everyday equipment shed hobby farms
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed hobby farms.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed hobby farms + seasonal storage
equipment shed hobby farms + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$460/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $460/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed Hobby Farms shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed Hobby Farms also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed Hobby Farms questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms cost?

A 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms from Steel and Stud starts at $22,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $460/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed hobby farms ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed hobby farms different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $460/month on a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed Hobby Farms quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms | Steel and Stud — From $22,100
12
20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,200$22,100SAVE $3,100
or $460/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Equipment Shed Hobby Farms

20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed Hobby Farms·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,100$25,200Save $3,100
or as low as $460/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$22,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-EQUIPMENT-SHED-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed Hobby Farms.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed Hobby Farms spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed Hobby Farms.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed hobby farms
Everyday equipment shed hobby farms
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed hobby farms.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed hobby farms + seasonal storage
equipment shed hobby farms + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$460/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $460/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed Hobby Farms shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Equipment Shed Hobby Farms

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed Hobby Farms also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed Hobby Farms questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms cost?

A 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms from Steel and Stud starts at $22,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $460/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed hobby farms ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed hobby farms different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $460/month on a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 equipment shed hobby farms typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed Hobby Farms quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Boat Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Boat Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Boat Trailer Storage

20×70 Boat Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Boat Trailer Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. The 20×70 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Boat Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat trailer storage
Everyday boat trailer storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Boat Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 boat trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Boat Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Boat Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 boat trailer storage cost?

A 20×70 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 boat trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 boat trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 boat trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 boat trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 boat trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 boat trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 boat trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 boat trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 boat trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 boat trailer storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Boat Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Boat Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Boat Trailer Storage

20×70 Boat Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Boat Trailer Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. The 20×70 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Boat Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat trailer storage
Everyday boat trailer storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Boat Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 boat trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Boat Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Boat Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 boat trailer storage cost?

A 20×70 boat trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 boat trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 boat trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 boat trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 boat trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 boat trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 boat trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 boat trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 boat trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 boat trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 boat trailer storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Auto Repair Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $24,000
12
20×70 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,350$24,000SAVE $3,350
or $500/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Auto Repair Shop

20×70 Auto Repair Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,000$27,350Save $3,350
or as low as $500/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$24,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. The 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$500/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $500/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $500/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $500/month on a 20×70 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 auto repair shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 auto repair shop typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$24,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Auto Repair Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $24,000
12
20×70 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,350$24,000SAVE $3,350
or $500/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Auto Repair Shop

20×70 Auto Repair Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,000$27,350Save $3,350
or as low as $500/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$24,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. The 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$500/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $500/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $500/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $500/month on a 20×70 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 auto repair shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 auto repair shop typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Barndominium Shell

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $31,700
12
20×70 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$36,150$31,700SAVE $4,450
or $660/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Barndominium Shell

20×70 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$31,700$36,150Save $4,450
or as low as $660/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$31,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. The 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$660/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $660/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 barndominium shell cost?

A 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $31,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $660/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $660/month on a 20×70 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 barndominium shell typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$31,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Barndominium Shell

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $31,700
12
20×70 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$36,150$31,700SAVE $4,450
or $660/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Barndominium Shell

20×70 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$31,700$36,150Save $4,450
or as low as $660/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$31,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. The 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$660/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $660/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 barndominium shell cost?

A 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $31,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $660/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $660/month on a 20×70 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 barndominium shell typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$31,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Side By Side Carport | Steel and Stud — From $15,350
12
20×70 Side By Side Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,500$15,350SAVE $2,150
or $320/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Side By Side Carport

20×70 Side By Side Carport, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 side by side carport from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Side By Side Carport·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,350$17,500Save $2,150
or as low as $320/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$15,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-SIDE-BY-SIDE-CARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay open cover.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Extra-wide certified span with braced legs. The 20×70 side by side carport from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

2+ vehicle / equipment baysHigh-clearance RV or ag slotPerimeter drainage apron20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay open cover

2+ vehicle / equipment bays · High-clearance RV or ag slot · Perimeter drainage apron

2+ vehicle / equipment bays at the front, high-clearance rv or ag slot in the middle, perimeter drainage apron at the rear. Capacity: 2+ vehicles or mixed RV + equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: vertical-roof upgrade, enclosed end bay, gutter kit.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Side By Side Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Side By Side Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Side By Side Carport spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Side By Side Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday side by side carport
Everyday side by side carport
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a side by side carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWside by side carport + seasonal storage
side by side carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Side By Side Carport — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$320/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 side by side carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $320/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Side By Side Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Side By Side Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Side By Side Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Side By Side Carport also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Side By Side Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 side by side carport cost?

A 20×70 side by side carport from Steel and Stud starts at $15,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $320/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 side by side carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud side by side carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 side by side carport?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud side by side carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 side by side carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 side by side carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 side by side carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $320/month on a 20×70 side by side carport.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 side by side carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 side by side carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 side by side carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 side by side carport typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Side By Side Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Side By Side Carport | Steel and Stud — From $15,350
12
20×70 Side By Side Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,500$15,350SAVE $2,150
or $320/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Side By Side Carport

20×70 Side By Side Carport, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 side by side carport from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Side By Side Carport·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,350$17,500Save $2,150
or as low as $320/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$15,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-SIDE-BY-SIDE-CARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay open cover.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Extra-wide certified span with braced legs. The 20×70 side by side carport from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

2+ vehicle / equipment baysHigh-clearance RV or ag slotPerimeter drainage apron20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay open cover

2+ vehicle / equipment bays · High-clearance RV or ag slot · Perimeter drainage apron

2+ vehicle / equipment bays at the front, high-clearance rv or ag slot in the middle, perimeter drainage apron at the rear. Capacity: 2+ vehicles or mixed RV + equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: vertical-roof upgrade, enclosed end bay, gutter kit.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Side By Side Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Side By Side Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Side By Side Carport spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Side By Side Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday side by side carport
Everyday side by side carport
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a side by side carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWside by side carport + seasonal storage
side by side carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Side By Side Carport — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$320/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 side by side carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $320/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Side By Side Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Side By Side Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Side By Side Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Side By Side Carport also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Side By Side Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 side by side carport cost?

A 20×70 side by side carport from Steel and Stud starts at $15,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $320/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 side by side carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud side by side carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 side by side carport?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud side by side carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 side by side carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 side by side carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 side by side carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $320/month on a 20×70 side by side carport.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 side by side carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 side by side carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 side by side carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 side by side carport typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Side By Side Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Horse Run In Shed | Steel and Stud — From $22,100
12
20×70 Horse Run In Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,200$22,100SAVE $3,100
or $460/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Horse Run In Shed

20×70 Horse Run In Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 horse run in shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Horse Run In Shed·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,100$25,200Save $3,100
or as low as $460/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$22,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HORSE-RUN-IN-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. The 20×70 horse run in shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

4 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

4 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

4 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses + tack + feed.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, stall partitions, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Horse Run In Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run In Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run In Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run in shed
Everyday horse run in shed
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run in shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run in shed + seasonal storage
horse run in shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Horse Run In Shed — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$460/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 horse run in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $460/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Horse Run In Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Horse Run In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run In Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run In Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 horse run in shed cost?

A 20×70 horse run in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $22,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $460/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 horse run in shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 horse run in shed?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run in shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 horse run in shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 horse run in shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 horse run in shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $460/month on a 20×70 horse run in shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 horse run in shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 horse run in shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 horse run in shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 horse run in shed typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Horse Run In Shed | Steel and Stud — From $22,100
12
20×70 Horse Run In Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,200$22,100SAVE $3,100
or $460/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Horse Run In Shed

20×70 Horse Run In Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 horse run in shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Horse Run In Shed·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,100$25,200Save $3,100
or as low as $460/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$22,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HORSE-RUN-IN-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. The 20×70 horse run in shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

4 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

4 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

4 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses + tack + feed.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, stall partitions, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Horse Run In Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run In Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run In Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run in shed
Everyday horse run in shed
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run in shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run in shed + seasonal storage
horse run in shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Horse Run In Shed — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$460/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 horse run in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $460/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Horse Run In Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Horse Run In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run In Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run In Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 horse run in shed cost?

A 20×70 horse run in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $22,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $460/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 horse run in shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 horse run in shed?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run in shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 horse run in shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 horse run in shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 horse run in shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $460/month on a 20×70 horse run in shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 horse run in shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 horse run in shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 horse run in shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 horse run in shed typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Hangar Style Hobby Shop

20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 hangar style hobby shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hangar Style Hobby Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HANGAR-STYLE-HOBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-aircraft hangar.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Bi-fold or hydraulic door spans full width. The 20×70 hangar style hobby shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing)TOOLS / ENGINE WORKOffice nook20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · single-aircraft hangar

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) · Tools / engine work · Office nook

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) at the front, tools / engine work in the middle, office nook at the rear. Capacity: 1 light aircraft up to 20ft wingspan.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: workbench, parts shelving.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hangar Style Hobby Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hangar Style Hobby Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hangar Style Hobby Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday hangar style hobby shop
Everyday hangar style hobby shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hangar style hobby shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhangar style hobby shop + seasonal storage
hangar style hobby shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 hangar style hobby shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hangar Style Hobby Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hangar Style Hobby Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hangar Style Hobby Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop cost?

A 20×70 hangar style hobby shop from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 hangar style hobby shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hangar style hobby shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hangar style hobby shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 hangar style hobby shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 hangar style hobby shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 hangar style hobby shop typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hangar Style Hobby Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Hangar Style Hobby Shop

20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 hangar style hobby shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hangar Style Hobby Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HANGAR-STYLE-HOBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-aircraft hangar.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Bi-fold or hydraulic door spans full width. The 20×70 hangar style hobby shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing)TOOLS / ENGINE WORKOffice nook20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · single-aircraft hangar

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) · Tools / engine work · Office nook

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) at the front, tools / engine work in the middle, office nook at the rear. Capacity: 1 light aircraft up to 20ft wingspan.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: workbench, parts shelving.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hangar Style Hobby Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hangar Style Hobby Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hangar Style Hobby Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday hangar style hobby shop
Everyday hangar style hobby shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hangar style hobby shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhangar style hobby shop + seasonal storage
hangar style hobby shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 hangar style hobby shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hangar Style Hobby Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Hangar Style Hobby Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hangar Style Hobby Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hangar Style Hobby Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop cost?

A 20×70 hangar style hobby shop from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 hangar style hobby shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hangar style hobby shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hangar style hobby shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 hangar style hobby shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 hangar style hobby shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 hangar style hobby shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 hangar style hobby shop typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hangar Style Hobby Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $24,000
12
20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,350$24,000SAVE $3,350
or $500/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Warehouse Inventory Storage

20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Warehouse Inventory Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,000$27,350Save $3,350
or as low as $500/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$24,000
24×70
wider
$31,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-business warehouse.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Single roll-up door, hand-truck operation. The 20×70 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Loading areaINVENTORY RACKSOffice corner20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · small-business warehouse

Loading area · Inventory racks · Office corner

Loading area at the front, inventory racks in the middle, office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~28 pallet positions.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shelving, desk + computer.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse inventory storage
Everyday warehouse inventory storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$500/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 warehouse inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $500/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage cost?

A 20×70 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $24,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $500/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 warehouse inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $500/month on a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 warehouse inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 warehouse inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 warehouse inventory storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$24,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $24,000
12
20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,350$24,000SAVE $3,350
or $500/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Warehouse Inventory Storage

20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Warehouse Inventory Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,000$27,350Save $3,350
or as low as $500/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$24,000
24×70
wider
$31,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-business warehouse.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Single roll-up door, hand-truck operation. The 20×70 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

Loading areaINVENTORY RACKSOffice corner20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · small-business warehouse

Loading area · Inventory racks · Office corner

Loading area at the front, inventory racks in the middle, office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~28 pallet positions.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shelving, desk + computer.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse inventory storage
Everyday warehouse inventory storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$500/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 warehouse inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $500/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Warehouse Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage cost?

A 20×70 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $24,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $500/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 warehouse inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $500/month on a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 warehouse inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 warehouse inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 warehouse inventory storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 warehouse inventory storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Community Fire Rescue Storage

20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 community fire rescue storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Community Fire Rescue Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-COMMUNITY-FIRE-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. The 20×70 community fire rescue storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: tool cage, material racking, lockable walk-in door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community Fire Rescue Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community Fire Rescue Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community Fire Rescue Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community fire rescue storage
Everyday community fire rescue storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community fire rescue storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity fire rescue storage + seasonal storage
community fire rescue storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 community fire rescue storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community Fire Rescue Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community Fire Rescue Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community Fire Rescue Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 community fire rescue storage cost?

A 20×70 community fire rescue storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 community fire rescue storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud community fire rescue storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 community fire rescue storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community fire rescue storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 community fire rescue storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 community fire rescue storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 community fire rescue storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 community fire rescue storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 community fire rescue storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 community fire rescue storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 community fire rescue storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 community fire rescue storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Community Fire Rescue Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Community Fire Rescue Storage

20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×70 community fire rescue storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Community Fire Rescue Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-COMMUNITY-FIRE-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. The 20×70 community fire rescue storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,400 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: tool cage, material racking, lockable walk-in door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community Fire Rescue Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community Fire Rescue Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community Fire Rescue Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community fire rescue storage
Everyday community fire rescue storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community fire rescue storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity fire rescue storage + seasonal storage
community fire rescue storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 community fire rescue storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community Fire Rescue Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Community Fire Rescue Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community Fire Rescue Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community Fire Rescue Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 community fire rescue storage cost?

A 20×70 community fire rescue storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 community fire rescue storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud community fire rescue storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 community fire rescue storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community fire rescue storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 community fire rescue storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 community fire rescue storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 community fire rescue storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 community fire rescue storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 community fire rescue storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 community fire rescue storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 community fire rescue storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 community fire rescue storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Community Fire Rescue Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop Kit Tradespeople

20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Kit Tradespeople·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-KIT-TRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Kit Tradespeople.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Kit Tradespeople spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Kit Tradespeople.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop kit tradespeople
Everyday workshop kit tradespeople
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop kit tradespeople.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop kit tradespeople + seasonal storage
workshop kit tradespeople + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Kit Tradespeople shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Kit Tradespeople also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Kit Tradespeople questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople cost?

A 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop kit tradespeople ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop kit tradespeople different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Kit Tradespeople quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop Kit Tradespeople

20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Kit Tradespeople·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-KIT-TRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Kit Tradespeople.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Kit Tradespeople spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Kit Tradespeople.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop kit tradespeople
Everyday workshop kit tradespeople
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop kit tradespeople.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop kit tradespeople + seasonal storage
workshop kit tradespeople + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Kit Tradespeople shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop Kit Tradespeople

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Kit Tradespeople also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Kit Tradespeople questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople cost?

A 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop kit tradespeople ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop kit tradespeople different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 workshop kit tradespeople typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Kit Tradespeople quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Commercial Garage Auto Shops

20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 commercial garage auto shops from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Garage Auto Shops·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-COMMERCIAL-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×75 commercial garage auto shops from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Garage Auto Shops.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Garage Auto Shops spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Garage Auto Shops.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial garage auto shops
Everyday commercial garage auto shops
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial garage auto shops.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial garage auto shops + seasonal storage
commercial garage auto shops + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 commercial garage auto shops is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Garage Auto Shops shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Garage Auto Shops also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Garage Auto Shops questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops cost?

A 20×75 commercial garage auto shops from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 commercial garage auto shops price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial garage auto shops ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial garage auto shops different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 commercial garage auto shops?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 commercial garage auto shops in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 commercial garage auto shops typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Garage Auto Shops quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Commercial Garage Auto Shops

20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 commercial garage auto shops from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Garage Auto Shops·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-COMMERCIAL-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×75 commercial garage auto shops from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Garage Auto Shops.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Garage Auto Shops spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Garage Auto Shops.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial garage auto shops
Everyday commercial garage auto shops
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial garage auto shops.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial garage auto shops + seasonal storage
commercial garage auto shops + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 commercial garage auto shops is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Garage Auto Shops shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Commercial Garage Auto Shops

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Garage Auto Shops also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Garage Auto Shops questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops cost?

A 20×75 commercial garage auto shops from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 commercial garage auto shops price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial garage auto shops ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial garage auto shops different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 commercial garage auto shops?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 commercial garage auto shops in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 commercial garage auto shops add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 commercial garage auto shops typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Garage Auto Shops quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fabrication Shop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fabrication Shop

20×75 Fabrication Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
20×80
longer
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 fabrication shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 fabrication shop typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fabrication Shop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fabrication Shop

20×75 Fabrication Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
20×80
longer
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 fabrication shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 fabrication shop typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $33,900
12
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$38,650$33,900SAVE $4,750
or $706/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Metal Barndominium Shell·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$33,900$38,650Save $4,750
or as low as $706/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$33,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-METAL-BARNDOMINIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. The 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday metal barndominium shell
Everyday metal barndominium shell
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
metal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$706/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 metal barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $706/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell cost?

A 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $33,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $706/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 metal barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 metal barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 metal barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $706/month on a 20×75 metal barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 metal barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 metal barndominium shell typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$33,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $33,900
12
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$38,650$33,900SAVE $4,750
or $706/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Metal Barndominium Shell·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$33,900$38,650Save $4,750
or as low as $706/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$33,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-METAL-BARNDOMINIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. The 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday metal barndominium shell
Everyday metal barndominium shell
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
metal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$706/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 metal barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $706/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell cost?

A 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $33,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $706/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 metal barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 metal barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 metal barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $706/month on a 20×75 metal barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 metal barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 metal barndominium shell typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$33,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Horse Barn Stalls | Steel and Stud — From $23,650
12
20×75 Horse Barn Stalls
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,950$23,650SAVE $3,300
or $493/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Horse Barn Stalls

20×75 Horse Barn Stalls, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 horse barn stalls from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Horse Barn Stalls·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,650$26,950Save $3,300
or as low as $493/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$23,650
24×75
wider
$30,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-HORSE-BARN-STALLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. The 20×75 horse barn stalls from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, stall partitions, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Horse Barn Stalls in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn Stalls.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn Stalls spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn Stalls.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn stalls
Everyday horse barn stalls
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn stalls.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn stalls + seasonal storage
horse barn stalls + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Horse Barn Stalls — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$493/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 horse barn stalls is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $493/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn Stalls shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Horse Barn Stalls buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Horse Barn Stalls

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn Stalls also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn Stalls questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 horse barn stalls cost?

A 20×75 horse barn stalls from Steel and Stud starts at $23,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $493/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 horse barn stalls price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse barn stalls ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 horse barn stalls?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn stalls different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 horse barn stalls need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 horse barn stalls delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 horse barn stalls without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $493/month on a 20×75 horse barn stalls.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 horse barn stalls?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 horse barn stalls in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 horse barn stalls add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 horse barn stalls typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn Stalls quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Horse Barn Stalls | Steel and Stud — From $23,650
12
20×75 Horse Barn Stalls
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,950$23,650SAVE $3,300
or $493/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Horse Barn Stalls

20×75 Horse Barn Stalls, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 horse barn stalls from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Horse Barn Stalls·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,650$26,950Save $3,300
or as low as $493/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$23,650
24×75
wider
$30,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-HORSE-BARN-STALLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. The 20×75 horse barn stalls from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, stall partitions, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Horse Barn Stalls in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn Stalls.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn Stalls spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn Stalls.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn stalls
Everyday horse barn stalls
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn stalls.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn stalls + seasonal storage
horse barn stalls + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Horse Barn Stalls — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$493/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 horse barn stalls is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $493/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn Stalls shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Horse Barn Stalls buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Horse Barn Stalls

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn Stalls also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn Stalls questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 horse barn stalls cost?

A 20×75 horse barn stalls from Steel and Stud starts at $23,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $493/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 horse barn stalls price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse barn stalls ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 horse barn stalls?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn stalls different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 horse barn stalls need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 horse barn stalls delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 horse barn stalls without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $493/month on a 20×75 horse barn stalls.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 horse barn stalls?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 horse barn stalls in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 horse barn stalls add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 horse barn stalls typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn Stalls quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fleet Garage Service Vans

20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 fleet garage service vans from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage Service Vans·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FLEET-GARAGE-SERBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. The 20×75 fleet garage service vans from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: compressor + lube reels, dispatch office, insulated envelope.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage Service Vans.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage Service Vans spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage Service Vans.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage service vans
Everyday fleet garage service vans
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage service vans.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage service vans + seasonal storage
fleet garage service vans + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fleet garage service vans is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage Service Vans shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage Service Vans also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage Service Vans questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fleet garage service vans cost?

A 20×75 fleet garage service vans from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fleet garage service vans price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage service vans ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fleet garage service vans?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage service vans different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fleet garage service vans need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fleet garage service vans delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fleet garage service vans without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 fleet garage service vans.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fleet garage service vans?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fleet garage service vans in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 fleet garage service vans add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 fleet garage service vans typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage Service Vans quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fleet Garage Service Vans

20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 fleet garage service vans from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage Service Vans·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FLEET-GARAGE-SERBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. The 20×75 fleet garage service vans from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: compressor + lube reels, dispatch office, insulated envelope.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage Service Vans.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage Service Vans spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage Service Vans.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage service vans
Everyday fleet garage service vans
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage service vans.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage service vans + seasonal storage
fleet garage service vans + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fleet garage service vans is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage Service Vans shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fleet Garage Service Vans

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage Service Vans also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage Service Vans questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fleet garage service vans cost?

A 20×75 fleet garage service vans from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fleet garage service vans price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage service vans ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fleet garage service vans?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage service vans different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fleet garage service vans need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fleet garage service vans delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fleet garage service vans without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 fleet garage service vans.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fleet garage service vans?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fleet garage service vans in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 fleet garage service vans add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 fleet garage service vans typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage Service Vans quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Agricultural Barn

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Agricultural Barn | Steel and Stud — From $23,650
12
20×75 Agricultural Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,950$23,650SAVE $3,300
or $493/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Agricultural Barn

20×75 Agricultural Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Agricultural Barn·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,650$26,950Save $3,300
or as low as $493/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$23,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-AGRICULTURAL-BARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your farm + ranch barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split-use layout with a lockable supply room. The 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Equipment / stock bayCENTER WORK ALLEYFeed + tool room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · farm + ranch barn

Equipment / stock bay · Center work alley · Feed + tool room

Equipment / stock bay at the front, center work alley in the middle, feed + tool room at the rear. Capacity: equipment + animals + feed under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: stall partitions, hay loft, wash-down bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Agricultural Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Barn spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural barn
Everyday agricultural barn
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural barn + seasonal storage
agricultural barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Agricultural Barn — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$493/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 agricultural barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $493/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Agricultural Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Agricultural Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Barn also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 agricultural barn cost?

A 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud starts at $23,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $493/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 agricultural barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 agricultural barn?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 agricultural barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 agricultural barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 agricultural barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $493/month on a 20×75 agricultural barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 agricultural barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 agricultural barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 agricultural barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 agricultural barn typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Agricultural Barn

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Agricultural Barn | Steel and Stud — From $23,650
12
20×75 Agricultural Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,950$23,650SAVE $3,300
or $493/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Agricultural Barn

20×75 Agricultural Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Agricultural Barn·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,650$26,950Save $3,300
or as low as $493/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$23,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-AGRICULTURAL-BARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your farm + ranch barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split-use layout with a lockable supply room. The 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Equipment / stock bayCENTER WORK ALLEYFeed + tool room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · farm + ranch barn

Equipment / stock bay · Center work alley · Feed + tool room

Equipment / stock bay at the front, center work alley in the middle, feed + tool room at the rear. Capacity: equipment + animals + feed under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: stall partitions, hay loft, wash-down bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Agricultural Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Barn spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural barn
Everyday agricultural barn
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural barn + seasonal storage
agricultural barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Agricultural Barn — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$493/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 agricultural barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $493/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Agricultural Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Agricultural Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Barn also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 agricultural barn cost?

A 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud starts at $23,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $493/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 agricultural barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 agricultural barn?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 agricultural barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 agricultural barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 agricultural barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $493/month on a 20×75 agricultural barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 agricultural barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 agricultural barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 agricultural barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 agricultural barn typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Equipment Storage Building

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Equipment Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $23,650
12
20×75 Equipment Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,950$23,650SAVE $3,300
or $493/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Equipment Storage Building

20×75 Equipment Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Storage Building·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,650$26,950Save $3,300
or as low as $493/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$23,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Equipment Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage building
Everyday equipment storage building
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage building + seasonal storage
equipment storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Equipment Storage Building — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$493/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 equipment storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $493/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Equipment Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Equipment Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 equipment storage building cost?

A 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $23,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $493/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 equipment storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 equipment storage building?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 equipment storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 equipment storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 equipment storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $493/month on a 20×75 equipment storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 equipment storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 equipment storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 equipment storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 equipment storage building typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Equipment Storage Building

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Equipment Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $23,650
12
20×75 Equipment Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,950$23,650SAVE $3,300
or $493/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Equipment Storage Building

20×75 Equipment Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Storage Building·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,650$26,950Save $3,300
or as low as $493/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$23,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Equipment Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage building
Everyday equipment storage building
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage building + seasonal storage
equipment storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Equipment Storage Building — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$493/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 equipment storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $493/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Equipment Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Equipment Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 equipment storage building cost?

A 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $23,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $493/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 equipment storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 equipment storage building?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 equipment storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 equipment storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 equipment storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $493/month on a 20×75 equipment storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 equipment storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 equipment storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 equipment storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 equipment storage building typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-MOBILE-CONTRACTOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Laid out on forklift turning radii. The 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Racked inventory rowsForklift aisle + stagingReceiving + office corner20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · commercial storage layout

Racked inventory rows · Forklift aisle + staging · Receiving + office corner

Racked inventory rows at the front, forklift aisle + staging in the middle, receiving + office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~30 pallet positions.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: pallet racking, dock or grade-level doors, office build-out.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday mobile contractor dispatch hub
Everyday mobile contractor dispatch hub
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile contractor dispatch hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
mobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub cost?

A 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-MOBILE-CONTRACTOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Laid out on forklift turning radii. The 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Racked inventory rowsForklift aisle + stagingReceiving + office corner20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · commercial storage layout

Racked inventory rows · Forklift aisle + staging · Receiving + office corner

Racked inventory rows at the front, forklift aisle + staging in the middle, receiving + office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~30 pallet positions.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: pallet racking, dock or grade-level doors, office build-out.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday mobile contractor dispatch hub
Everyday mobile contractor dispatch hub
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile contractor dispatch hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
mobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub cost?

A 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 RV Garage Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 RV Garage Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75RV Garage Workshop

20×75 RV Garage Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 rv garage workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Garage Workshop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
24×75
wider
$33,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-RV-GARAGE-WORKSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides and roof-mounted gear. The 20×75 rv garage workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Multiple RV baysService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple roll-up doors, tool wall, mezzanine storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 RV Garage Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Garage Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Garage Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Garage Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday rv garage workshop
Everyday rv garage workshop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv garage workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv garage workshop + seasonal storage
rv garage workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 RV Garage Workshop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 rv garage workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Garage Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 RV Garage Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 RV Garage Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Garage Workshop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Garage Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 rv garage workshop cost?

A 20×75 rv garage workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 rv garage workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv garage workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 rv garage workshop?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv garage workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 rv garage workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 rv garage workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 rv garage workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 rv garage workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 rv garage workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 rv garage workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 rv garage workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 rv garage workshop typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Garage Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 RV Garage Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 RV Garage Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75RV Garage Workshop

20×75 RV Garage Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 rv garage workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Garage Workshop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
24×75
wider
$33,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-RV-GARAGE-WORKSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides and roof-mounted gear. The 20×75 rv garage workshop from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

Multiple RV baysService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple roll-up doors, tool wall, mezzanine storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 RV Garage Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Garage Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Garage Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Garage Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday rv garage workshop
Everyday rv garage workshop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv garage workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv garage workshop + seasonal storage
rv garage workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 RV Garage Workshop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 rv garage workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Garage Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 RV Garage Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 RV Garage Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Garage Workshop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Garage Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 rv garage workshop cost?

A 20×75 rv garage workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 rv garage workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv garage workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 rv garage workshop?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv garage workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 rv garage workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 rv garage workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 rv garage workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 rv garage workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 rv garage workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 rv garage workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 rv garage workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 rv garage workshop typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Garage Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop Hobby Garage

20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 workshop hobby garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Hobby Garage·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×75 workshop hobby garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop hobby garage
Everyday workshop hobby garage
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop hobby garage + seasonal storage
workshop hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop hobby garage cost?

A 20×75 workshop hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop hobby garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop hobby garage?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 workshop hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 workshop hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 workshop hobby garage typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop Hobby Garage

20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 workshop hobby garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Hobby Garage·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×75 workshop hobby garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop hobby garage
Everyday workshop hobby garage
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop hobby garage + seasonal storage
workshop hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop hobby garage cost?

A 20×75 workshop hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop hobby garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop hobby garage?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 workshop hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 workshop hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 workshop hobby garage typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Storage Building Self Storage Operators

20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 storage building self storage operators from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Storage Building Self Storage Operators·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your starter storage row.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Single-row drive-up configuration. The 20×75 storage building self storage operators from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row (roll-up doors)Drive aisleKeypad entry20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · starter storage row

Unit row (roll-up doors) · Drive aisle · Keypad entry

Unit row (roll-up doors) at the front, drive aisle in the middle, keypad entry at the rear. Capacity: ~11 rentable 10×10-equivalent units.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: partition kit, roll-up door upgrade, gutter package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building Self Storage Operators.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building Self Storage Operators spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building Self Storage Operators.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building self storage operators
Everyday storage building self storage operators
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building self storage operators.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building self storage operators + seasonal storage
storage building self storage operators + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 storage building self storage operators is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building Self Storage Operators shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building Self Storage Operators also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building Self Storage Operators questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 storage building self storage operators cost?

A 20×75 storage building self storage operators from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 storage building self storage operators price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud storage building self storage operators ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 storage building self storage operators?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building self storage operators different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 storage building self storage operators need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 storage building self storage operators delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 storage building self storage operators without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 storage building self storage operators.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 storage building self storage operators?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 storage building self storage operators in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 storage building self storage operators add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 storage building self storage operators typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building Self Storage Operators quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators | Steel and Stud — From $25,700
12
20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,300$25,700SAVE $3,600
or $535/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Storage Building Self Storage Operators

20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×75 storage building self storage operators from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Storage Building Self Storage Operators·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,700$29,300Save $3,600
or as low as $535/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$25,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your starter storage row.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Single-row drive-up configuration. The 20×75 storage building self storage operators from Steel and Stud puts 1,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row (roll-up doors)Drive aisleKeypad entry20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · starter storage row

Unit row (roll-up doors) · Drive aisle · Keypad entry

Unit row (roll-up doors) at the front, drive aisle in the middle, keypad entry at the rear. Capacity: ~11 rentable 10×10-equivalent units.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: partition kit, roll-up door upgrade, gutter package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building Self Storage Operators.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building Self Storage Operators spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building Self Storage Operators.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building self storage operators
Everyday storage building self storage operators
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building self storage operators.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building self storage operators + seasonal storage
storage building self storage operators + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$535/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 storage building self storage operators is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $535/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building Self Storage Operators shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Storage Building Self Storage Operators

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building Self Storage Operators also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$33,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building Self Storage Operators questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 storage building self storage operators cost?

A 20×75 storage building self storage operators from Steel and Stud starts at $25,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $535/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 storage building self storage operators price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud storage building self storage operators ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 storage building self storage operators?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building self storage operators different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 storage building self storage operators need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 storage building self storage operators delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 storage building self storage operators without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $535/month on a 20×75 storage building self storage operators.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 storage building self storage operators?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 storage building self storage operators in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 storage building self storage operators add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 storage building self storage operators typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building Self Storage Operators quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Tandem Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Tandem Garage | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Tandem Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Tandem Garage

20×80 Tandem Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Tandem Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-TANDEM-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Tandem Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tandem Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tandem Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tandem Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday tandem garage
Everyday tandem garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tandem garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtandem garage + seasonal storage
tandem garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Tandem Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 tandem garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tandem Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Tandem Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Tandem Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tandem Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tandem Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 tandem garage cost?

A 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 tandem garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tandem garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 tandem garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tandem garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 tandem garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 tandem garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 tandem garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 tandem garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 tandem garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 tandem garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 tandem garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 tandem garage typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tandem Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Tandem Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Tandem Garage | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Tandem Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Tandem Garage

20×80 Tandem Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Tandem Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-TANDEM-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Tandem Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tandem Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tandem Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tandem Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday tandem garage
Everyday tandem garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tandem garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtandem garage + seasonal storage
tandem garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Tandem Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 tandem garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tandem Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Tandem Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Tandem Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tandem Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tandem Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 tandem garage cost?

A 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 tandem garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tandem garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 tandem garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tandem garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 tandem garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 tandem garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 tandem garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 tandem garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 tandem garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 tandem garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 tandem garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 tandem garage typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tandem Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 RV Cover Side Entry | Steel and Stud — From $17,550
12
20×80 RV Cover Side Entry
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,000$17,550SAVE $2,450
or $366/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80RV Cover Side Entry

20×80 RV Cover Side Entry, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 rv cover side entry from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Cover Side Entry·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,550$20,000Save $2,450
or as low as $366/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$17,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-RV-COVER-SIDE-ENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides and roof-mounted gear. The 20×80 rv cover side entry from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple roll-up doors, tool wall, mezzanine storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 RV Cover Side Entry in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover Side Entry.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover Side Entry spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover Side Entry.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover side entry
Everyday rv cover side entry
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover side entry.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover side entry + seasonal storage
rv cover side entry + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 RV Cover Side Entry — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$366/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 rv cover side entry is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $366/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover Side Entry shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 RV Cover Side Entry buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 RV Cover Side Entry

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover Side Entry also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover Side Entry questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 rv cover side entry cost?

A 20×80 rv cover side entry from Steel and Stud starts at $17,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $366/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 rv cover side entry price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover side entry ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 rv cover side entry?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover side entry different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 rv cover side entry need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 rv cover side entry delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 rv cover side entry without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $366/month on a 20×80 rv cover side entry.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 rv cover side entry?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 rv cover side entry in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 rv cover side entry add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 rv cover side entry typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover Side Entry quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 RV Cover Side Entry | Steel and Stud — From $17,550
12
20×80 RV Cover Side Entry
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,000$17,550SAVE $2,450
or $366/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80RV Cover Side Entry

20×80 RV Cover Side Entry, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 rv cover side entry from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Cover Side Entry·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,550$20,000Save $2,450
or as low as $366/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$17,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-RV-COVER-SIDE-ENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides and roof-mounted gear. The 20×80 rv cover side entry from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple roll-up doors, tool wall, mezzanine storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 RV Cover Side Entry in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover Side Entry.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover Side Entry spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover Side Entry.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover side entry
Everyday rv cover side entry
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover side entry.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover side entry + seasonal storage
rv cover side entry + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 RV Cover Side Entry — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$366/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 rv cover side entry is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $366/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover Side Entry shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 RV Cover Side Entry buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 RV Cover Side Entry

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover Side Entry also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover Side Entry questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 rv cover side entry cost?

A 20×80 rv cover side entry from Steel and Stud starts at $17,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $366/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 rv cover side entry price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover side entry ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 rv cover side entry?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover side entry different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 rv cover side entry need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 rv cover side entry delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 rv cover side entry without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $366/month on a 20×80 rv cover side entry.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 rv cover side entry?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 rv cover side entry in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 rv cover side entry add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 rv cover side entry typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover Side Entry quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fleet Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fleet Garage

20×80 Fleet Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. The 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: compressor + lube reels, dispatch office, insulated envelope.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fleet Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fleet garage cost?

A 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fleet garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fleet garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 fleet garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 fleet garage typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fleet Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fleet Garage

20×80 Fleet Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. The 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: compressor + lube reels, dispatch office, insulated envelope.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fleet Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fleet garage cost?

A 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fleet garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fleet garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 fleet garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 fleet garage typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Auto Repair Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Auto Repair Shop

20×80 Auto Repair Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. The 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 auto repair shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 auto repair shop typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Auto Repair Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Auto Repair Shop

20×80 Auto Repair Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. The 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 auto repair shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 auto repair shop typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Equipment Shed

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud — From $25,250
12
20×80 Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,800$25,250SAVE $3,550
or $526/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Equipment Shed

20×80 Equipment Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,250$28,800Save $3,550
or as low as $526/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$25,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-EQUIPMENT-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed
Everyday equipment shed
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed + seasonal storage
equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Equipment Shed — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$526/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $526/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 equipment shed cost?

A 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $25,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $526/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 equipment shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 equipment shed?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $526/month on a 20×80 equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 equipment shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 equipment shed typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Equipment Shed

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud — From $25,250
12
20×80 Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,800$25,250SAVE $3,550
or $526/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Equipment Shed

20×80 Equipment Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,250$28,800Save $3,550
or as low as $526/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$25,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-EQUIPMENT-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed
Everyday equipment shed
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed + seasonal storage
equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Equipment Shed — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$526/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $526/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 equipment shed cost?

A 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $25,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $526/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 equipment shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 equipment shed?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $526/month on a 20×80 equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 equipment shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 equipment shed typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Barndominium Wing

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Barndominium Wing | Steel and Stud — From $36,200
12
20×80 Barndominium Wing
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$41,250$36,200SAVE $5,050
or $754/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Barndominium Wing

20×80 Barndominium Wing, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Wing·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$36,200$41,250Save $5,050
or as low as $754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$36,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BARNDOMINIUM-WINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. The 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Barndominium Wing in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Wing.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Wing spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Wing.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium wing
Everyday barndominium wing
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium wing.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium wing + seasonal storage
barndominium wing + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Barndominium Wing — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 barndominium wing is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Wing shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Barndominium Wing buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Barndominium Wing

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Wing also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Wing questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 barndominium wing cost?

A 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud starts at $36,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 barndominium wing price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium wing ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 barndominium wing?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium wing different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 barndominium wing need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 barndominium wing delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 barndominium wing without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $754/month on a 20×80 barndominium wing.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 barndominium wing?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 barndominium wing in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 barndominium wing add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 barndominium wing typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Wing quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$36,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Barndominium Wing

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Barndominium Wing | Steel and Stud — From $36,200
12
20×80 Barndominium Wing
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$41,250$36,200SAVE $5,050
or $754/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Barndominium Wing

20×80 Barndominium Wing, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Wing·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$36,200$41,250Save $5,050
or as low as $754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$36,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BARNDOMINIUM-WINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. The 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Barndominium Wing in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Wing.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Wing spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Wing.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium wing
Everyday barndominium wing
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium wing.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium wing + seasonal storage
barndominium wing + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Barndominium Wing — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 barndominium wing is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Wing shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Barndominium Wing buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Barndominium Wing

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Wing also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Wing questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 barndominium wing cost?

A 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud starts at $36,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 barndominium wing price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium wing ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 barndominium wing?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium wing different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 barndominium wing need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 barndominium wing delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 barndominium wing without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $754/month on a 20×80 barndominium wing.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 barndominium wing?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 barndominium wing in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 barndominium wing add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 barndominium wing typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Wing quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$36,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Workshop Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Workshop Run | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Workshop Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Workshop Run

20×80 Workshop Run, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-WORKSHOP-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Workshop Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Run.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop run
Everyday workshop run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop run + seasonal storage
workshop run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Workshop Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 workshop run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Workshop Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Workshop Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 workshop run cost?

A 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 workshop run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 workshop run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 workshop run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 workshop run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 workshop run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 workshop run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 workshop run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 workshop run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 workshop run add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 workshop run typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Workshop Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Workshop Run | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Workshop Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Workshop Run

20×80 Workshop Run, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Workshop Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-WORKSHOP-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Workshop Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Run.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop run
Everyday workshop run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop run + seasonal storage
workshop run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Workshop Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 workshop run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Workshop Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Workshop Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 workshop run cost?

A 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 workshop run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 workshop run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 workshop run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 workshop run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 workshop run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 workshop run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 workshop run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 workshop run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 workshop run add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 workshop run typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Horse Run In Tack | Steel and Stud — From $25,250
12
20×80 Horse Run In Tack
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,800$25,250SAVE $3,550
or $526/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Horse Run In Tack

20×80 Horse Run In Tack, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 horse run in tack from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Horse Run In Tack·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,250$28,800Save $3,550
or as low as $526/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$25,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HORSE-RUN-IN-TACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. The 20×80 horse run in tack from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, stall partitions, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Horse Run In Tack in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run In Tack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run In Tack spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run In Tack.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run in tack
Everyday horse run in tack
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run in tack.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run in tack + seasonal storage
horse run in tack + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Horse Run In Tack — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$526/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 horse run in tack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $526/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run In Tack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Horse Run In Tack buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Horse Run In Tack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run In Tack also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run In Tack questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 horse run in tack cost?

A 20×80 horse run in tack from Steel and Stud starts at $25,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $526/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 horse run in tack price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run in tack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 horse run in tack?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run in tack different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 horse run in tack need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 horse run in tack delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 horse run in tack without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $526/month on a 20×80 horse run in tack.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 horse run in tack?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 horse run in tack in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 horse run in tack add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 horse run in tack typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run In Tack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$25,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Horse Run In Tack | Steel and Stud — From $25,250
12
20×80 Horse Run In Tack
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,800$25,250SAVE $3,550
or $526/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Horse Run In Tack

20×80 Horse Run In Tack, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 horse run in tack from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Horse Run In Tack·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,250$28,800Save $3,550
or as low as $526/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$25,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HORSE-RUN-IN-TACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. The 20×80 horse run in tack from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, stall partitions, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Horse Run In Tack in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run In Tack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run In Tack spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run In Tack.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run in tack
Everyday horse run in tack
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run in tack.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run in tack + seasonal storage
horse run in tack + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Horse Run In Tack — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$526/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 horse run in tack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $526/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run In Tack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Horse Run In Tack buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Horse Run In Tack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run In Tack also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run In Tack questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 horse run in tack cost?

A 20×80 horse run in tack from Steel and Stud starts at $25,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $526/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 horse run in tack price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run in tack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 horse run in tack?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run in tack different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 horse run in tack need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 horse run in tack delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 horse run in tack without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $526/month on a 20×80 horse run in tack.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 horse run in tack?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 horse run in tack in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 horse run in tack add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 horse run in tack typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run In Tack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Batting Cage Building

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Batting Cage Building | Steel and Stud — From $36,200
12
20×80 Batting Cage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$41,250$36,200SAVE $5,050
or $754/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Batting Cage Building

20×80 Batting Cage Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Batting Cage Building·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$36,200$41,250Save $5,050
or as low as $754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$36,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BATTING-CAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your batting cage building layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. The 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · batting cage building layout

Batting Cage Building layout.

The 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

💡 Pro tip:Batting Cage Building at 20×80 — stud-framed and insulation-ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Batting Cage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Batting Cage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Batting Cage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Batting Cage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday batting cage building
Everyday batting cage building
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a batting cage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbatting cage building + seasonal storage
batting cage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Batting Cage Building — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 batting cage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Batting Cage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Batting Cage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Batting Cage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Batting Cage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Batting Cage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 batting cage building cost?

A 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud starts at $36,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 batting cage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud batting cage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 batting cage building?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud batting cage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 batting cage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 batting cage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 batting cage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $754/month on a 20×80 batting cage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 batting cage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 batting cage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 batting cage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 batting cage building typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Batting Cage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$36,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Batting Cage Building

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Batting Cage Building | Steel and Stud — From $36,200
12
20×80 Batting Cage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$41,250$36,200SAVE $5,050
or $754/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Batting Cage Building

20×80 Batting Cage Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Batting Cage Building·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$36,200$41,250Save $5,050
or as low as $754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$36,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BATTING-CAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your batting cage building layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. The 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · batting cage building layout

Batting Cage Building layout.

The 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

💡 Pro tip:Batting Cage Building at 20×80 — stud-framed and insulation-ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Batting Cage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Batting Cage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Batting Cage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Batting Cage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday batting cage building
Everyday batting cage building
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a batting cage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbatting cage building + seasonal storage
batting cage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Batting Cage Building — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 batting cage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Batting Cage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Batting Cage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Batting Cage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Batting Cage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Batting Cage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 batting cage building cost?

A 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud starts at $36,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 batting cage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud batting cage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 batting cage building?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud batting cage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 batting cage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 batting cage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 batting cage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $754/month on a 20×80 batting cage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 batting cage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 batting cage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 batting cage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 batting cage building typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Batting Cage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$36,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fabrication Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fabrication Shop

20×80 Fabrication Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×75
smaller
$25,700
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 fabrication shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 fabrication shop typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fabrication Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $27,450
12
20×80 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$31,300$27,450SAVE $3,850
or $572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fabrication Shop

20×80 Fabrication Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$27,450$31,300Save $3,850
or as low as $572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×75
smaller
$25,700
20×80
this size
$27,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. The 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, compressor closet, lumber rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $27,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $572/month on a 20×80 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 fabrication shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 fabrication shop typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$27,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Mini-Storage Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Mini Storage Run | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Mini Storage Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Mini Storage Run

20×80 Mini Storage Run, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 mini storage run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Mini Storage Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-MINI-STORAGE-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your starter storage row.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Single-row drive-up configuration. The 20×80 mini storage run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row (roll-up doors)Drive aisleKeypad entry20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · starter storage row

Unit row (roll-up doors) · Drive aisle · Keypad entry

Unit row (roll-up doors) at the front, drive aisle in the middle, keypad entry at the rear. Capacity: ~12 rentable 10×10-equivalent units.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: partition kit, roll-up door upgrade, gutter package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Mini Storage Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini Storage Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini Storage Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini Storage Run.

DAILY USEEveryday mini storage run
Everyday mini storage run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini storage run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini storage run + seasonal storage
mini storage run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Mini Storage Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 mini storage run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini Storage Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Mini Storage Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Mini Storage Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini Storage Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini Storage Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 mini storage run cost?

A 20×80 mini storage run from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 mini storage run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mini storage run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 mini storage run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini storage run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 mini storage run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 mini storage run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 mini storage run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 mini storage run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 mini storage run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 mini storage run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 mini storage run add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 mini storage run typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mini Storage Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Mini-Storage Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Mini Storage Run | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Mini Storage Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Mini Storage Run

20×80 Mini Storage Run, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 mini storage run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Mini Storage Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-MINI-STORAGE-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your starter storage row.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Single-row drive-up configuration. The 20×80 mini storage run from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row (roll-up doors)Drive aisleKeypad entry20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · starter storage row

Unit row (roll-up doors) · Drive aisle · Keypad entry

Unit row (roll-up doors) at the front, drive aisle in the middle, keypad entry at the rear. Capacity: ~12 rentable 10×10-equivalent units.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: partition kit, roll-up door upgrade, gutter package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Mini Storage Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini Storage Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini Storage Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini Storage Run.

DAILY USEEveryday mini storage run
Everyday mini storage run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini storage run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini storage run + seasonal storage
mini storage run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Mini Storage Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 mini storage run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini Storage Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Mini Storage Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Mini Storage Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini Storage Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini Storage Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 mini storage run cost?

A 20×80 mini storage run from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 mini storage run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mini storage run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 mini storage run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini storage run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 mini storage run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 mini storage run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 mini storage run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 mini storage run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 mini storage run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 mini storage run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 mini storage run add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 mini storage run typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mini Storage Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Hobby Shop Loft | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Hobby Shop Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Hobby Shop Loft

20×80 Hobby Shop Loft, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 hobby shop loft from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hobby Shop Loft·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HOBBY-SHOP-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 20×80 hobby shop loft from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBAR + GAME ZONEGuest suite + bath + storage20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 64+ guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Hobby Shop Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Shop Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Shop Loft spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Shop Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby shop loft
Everyday hobby shop loft
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby shop loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby shop loft + seasonal storage
hobby shop loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Hobby Shop Loft — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 hobby shop loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Shop Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Hobby Shop Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Hobby Shop Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Shop Loft also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Shop Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 hobby shop loft cost?

A 20×80 hobby shop loft from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 hobby shop loft price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby shop loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 hobby shop loft?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby shop loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 hobby shop loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 hobby shop loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 hobby shop loft without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 hobby shop loft.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 hobby shop loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 hobby shop loft in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 hobby shop loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 hobby shop loft typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Shop Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Hobby Shop Loft | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Hobby Shop Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Hobby Shop Loft

20×80 Hobby Shop Loft, built for daily backyard use.

The 20×80 hobby shop loft from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hobby Shop Loft·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,600 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HOBBY-SHOP-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 20×80 hobby shop loft from Steel and Stud puts 1,600 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBAR + GAME ZONEGuest suite + bath + storage20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 64+ guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Hobby Shop Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Shop Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Shop Loft spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Shop Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby shop loft
Everyday hobby shop loft
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby shop loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby shop loft + seasonal storage
hobby shop loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Hobby Shop Loft — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 hobby shop loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Shop Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Hobby Shop Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Hobby Shop Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Shop Loft also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Shop Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 hobby shop loft cost?

A 20×80 hobby shop loft from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 hobby shop loft price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby shop loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 hobby shop loft?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby shop loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 hobby shop loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 hobby shop loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 hobby shop loft without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 hobby shop loft.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 hobby shop loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 hobby shop loft in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 hobby shop loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 hobby shop loft typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Shop Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Building Fits Your Use? Design It in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Instant Estimate

Building Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Pre-Engineered Steel

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Over Stick-Built

For every use case — workshop, garage, agricultural, retail, fleet, equestrian — pre-engineered steel beats stick-built on timeline, lifetime cost and durability. Here is why thousands of owners chose Steel and Stud for their specific use.

📈

40 to 60% Lower Total Build Cost

Factory fabrication cuts on-site labor, eliminates material waste and compresses your project timeline from months to weeks. Most owners save $15 to $30/sqft versus comparable wood-frame or concrete block construction.

📑

PE-Stamped Drawings Included

Structural engineering and stamped plans come standard with every cold-formed steel order. Designed for your local wind speed, snow load and seismic zone. Submit directly to your building department for permit approval.

Column-Free Interiors to 200+ Feet

Rigid frame engineering eliminates support columns inside the building envelope. Use every square foot of floor space for equipment, inventory, vehicles, courts or congregation seating without obstruction.

🔨

Zero Rot, Warp or Termite Risk

Galvanized steel framing and coated panels resist corrosion, mold and insect damage. The structure holds its form for decades with minimal upkeep. No repainting, no replacing warped studs, no pest treatments.

🌏

Expand, Extend or Relocate

Need more space next year? Add bays to extend length, attach lean-tos for side coverage, or install mezzanine framing for a second level. If your site changes, the building can be disassembled and re-erected on a new foundation.

🏧

Design and Price Online in 3D

The online building configurator lets you set exact dimensions, roof profile, panel type, insulation, doors, windows, colors and accessories. See instant pricing, then download your configuration summary.

Span Engineering

Clear Span vs Single Span vs Multi-Span

The span type you choose depends on your use case. Open arenas and worship halls need clear span; multi-bay shops and warehouses can use multi-span at lower cost. Steel and Stud engineers each building to the right span for its intended use.

Clear Span

No columns, W up to 80 ft

Zero interior columns
Maximum floor plan flexibility
Ideal for sports, worship, hangars
Higher cost per sqft at wide spans

Single Span

Small builds, W up to 40 ft

Most affordable option
Fastest fabrication lead time
Great for small shops and storage
Limited to 40 ft max width
Customer Reviews

What Property Owners Say About Steel and Stud

Real customers, real use cases. See how 15,000+ property owners — from horse barn owners to commercial fleet operators — picked the right Steel and Stud building for their use.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We compared five metal building companies before choosing Steel and Stud for our 50x100 distribution warehouse. Their quote came in 28 percent under the nearest competitor for identical wind and snow ratings. The PE-stamped drawings sailed through our Shelby County permit office on the first submission with zero revisions. Building was fabricated, shipped and erected in under 10 weeks from deposit to occupancy."

TC
Thomas C.
Memphis, TN
50X100X18 WAREHOUSE
★★★★★

"Our 60x80 riding arena and equipment barn went up on our Montana ranch last fall. The Steel and Stud team walked us through every decision in the 3D configurator, from overhead door placement for tractor access to insulation thickness for our winters. Clear span interior gives the horses a full 60 feet of unobstructed arena space with no columns to navigate. Would absolutely recommend Steel and Stud to any rancher or equestrian facility."

LP
Linda P.
Bozeman, MT
60X80X16 AGRICULTURAL BUILDING
★★★★☆

"Expanded our auto body shop with a 40x60 industrial building from Steel and Stud. The erection crew was professional and efficient. Scheduling took about two weeks longer than originally quoted due to a holiday backlog, but the finished building is exactly what we specified and the pricing was fair. The 16-foot eave height gives us room for a two-post lift and still fits a paint booth without clearance issues. Good experience overall with Steel and Stud."

MR
Mike R.
Jacksonville, FL
40X60X16 INDUSTRIAL BUILDING
Common Questions

Use Case FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering the right steel building for your use case: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring, dimensions and use-specific engineering options.

Widths from 20 to 100+ feet, lengths from 20 to 200+ feet, eave heights from 10 to 24 feet. Buildings wider than 60 feet typically use multi-span framing with interior columns.

Shell pricing ranges from $8 to $22 per square foot depending on span, height, load ratings, insulation and accessories. Larger footprints cost less per foot due to fixed engineering spread over more area. Steel and Stud provides itemized quotes so you can compare line by line.

Clear span means zero interior columns, ideal when you need open floor space (warehouses, arenas, hangars). Multi-span uses interior columns to achieve wider total footprints (80 to 200+ feet) at lower cost. Choose based on how you plan to use the interior.

Yes. Every cold-formed steel building ships with professional structural engineering and stamped drawings ready for your local building department. No separate engineering fee.

Roll-up overhead doors to 24x16, walk-in doors, windows, skylights, gutters, insulation, wainscot, cupolas, lean-tos, mezzanine framing, crane rails and bi-fold hangar doors. Everything is configurable in the 3D designer.

Six to twelve weeks from approved engineering. Components ship on flatbed trucks to your site, ready for erection. Delivery is included in pricing for all 48 states.

Buildings under 40x60 can be owner-erected with the right equipment and experience. Larger structures need a professional crew with crane access. We can connect you with experienced erectors in your region.

Yes. Commercial financing, lease-to-own, equipment financing and monthly payment plans are all available. View all options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Steel Buildings By Use Case — How To Pick The Right One

Pre-engineered steel structures use cold-formed framing fabricated off-site to your exact specifications. The kit ships to your property, ready for ground-up assembly. This eliminates the weather delays, material waste and skilled-labor bottleneck of conventional construction, cutting total project cost by 40 to 60 percent on average. Steel and Stud has delivered this approach to thousands of commercial and agricultural property owners since 2004.

Available widths run from 20 to 100+ feet. Lengths extend from 20 to 200+ feet in bay increments. Eave heights span 10 to 24+ feet. Rigid frame engineering, a Steel and Stud core competency, delivers column-free interiors to 80 feet wide. Multi-span configurations push total width past 200 feet for campus-scale facilities.

What Drives Pricing in 2026

Total square footage, eave height, span type, local load requirements (wind, snow, seismic), insulation spec, door count and delivery distance all factor into your final quote. Rough benchmarks: $8 to $14 per square foot for agricultural shells, $12 to $18 for commercial buildings, $16 to $22+ for heavy industrial with crane rails or mezzanines. Larger footprints cost less per foot because fixed engineering is spread across more area.

How the 3D Building Configurator Works

The online design tool walks you through dimensions, roof profile (gable, gambrel, single slope), panel orientation, insulation layers, door and window placement, color selection and structural add-ons. It generates a live price estimate and downloadable configuration. A building specialist then finalizes the engineering package and prepares stamped drawings for your permit submission.

Industry Applications

Commercial: retail storefronts, auto shops, contractor yards, self-storage facilities. Industrial: manufacturing plants, distribution hubs, fleet maintenance bays. Agricultural: equipment barns, hay storage, livestock shelter, riding arenas. Institutional: churches, gyms, government facilities, aviation hangars, sports complexes. Each application benefits from open span interiors, fast erection and low lifetime maintenance.

Related Categories

For smaller enclosed structures, explore enclosed steel garages and open shelters by use case. For agricultural use, see metal barns. For individual framing components, browse purlins, standing seam, insulated panels and roofing systems.

READY TO BUILD THE RIGHT BUILDING FOR YOUR USE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who picked Steel and Stud for their specific use case — from backyard workshops to commercial fleet garages. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on every order.

View Cart